Yamaha DSP-AX3200 Handleiding

Yamaha
Merk
Yamaha
Model
DSP-AX3200
Categorie
Audio versterkers
Type
Handleiding
DSP-AX3200
GB
AV AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Japan
V817900
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
DSP-AX3200
CAUTION
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit
— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,
vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a
room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation
inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,
tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct
heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit
rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any
damage resulting from use of this unit with a
voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an
electrical storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects
and/or liquid drops inside this unit.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long
periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding
that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K.
Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS ....................................................... 1
FEATURES ........................................................ 2
GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4
Front Panel ............................................................... 4
Remote Control ........................................................ 6
Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7
Front Panel Display .................................................. 8
Rear Panel ................................................................ 9
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10
Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10
Speaker Placement ................................................. 10
Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11
CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14
Before Connecting Components ............................ 14
Connecting Video Components .............................. 14
Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16
Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18
Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19
Turning on the Power ............................................. 19
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 20
OSD Modes ............................................................ 20
Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 21
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ...
21
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS ....................................................... 22
Before You Begin ................................................... 22
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 24
Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26
Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27
Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 28
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING
(DSP) ............................................................ 30
Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 30
Hi-Fi DSP Programs............................................... 30
CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32
Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32
CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34
BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 36
ADVANCED OPERATION
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 37
Control Area ........................................................... 37
Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 38
Programming a New Remote Control Function
(Learn Feature) ................................................... 39
Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 40
Changing the Source Name in the Display Window
............................................................................ 42
Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed
Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ...
42
Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 43
Each Component Control Area .............................. 45
SET MENU ...................................................... 50
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 50
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 51
2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 54
3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main
speakers)............................................................. 55
4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 55
5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 55
6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 56
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 56
8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 57
9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 58
10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 58
11 D-RANGE ........................................................ 59
12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 59
13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 60
14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 60
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS .................................................. 61
SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 62
Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 62
Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 62
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER
EDITING ..................................................... 63
What is a sound field? ............................................ 63
Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 63
Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 64
Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 64
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 65
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 69
GLOSSARY ..................................................... 73
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 75
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are
trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.
FEATURES
Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Main: 120 W + 120 W
Center: 120 W
Rear: 120 W + 120 W
Rear center: 120 W
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder
◆ DTS/DTS ES (Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1)/DTS
Neo: 6 Decoder
◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP
Other Features
◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items
for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video
System
◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other
Future Formats
◆ BASS EXTENSION for Reinforcing Bass
Response
◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in
Controlling This Unit
◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability
◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability
◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks
◆ Sleep Timer
◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
and “Learning” Capability
◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the
original signal
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this
manual.
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
3
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
–+
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1 Open the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the
correct direction by aligning the + and –
marks on the batteries with the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 After new batteries are correctly inserted,
press the RESET button in the battery
compartment using a ball point pen or
similar object. (This does not clear the
contents of the memory.)
4 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps
into place.
Connection GuideBatteries (3) (LR6)
Remote control
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check your package to make sure it has the following items.
Power Cord
(Europe model only)
RESET button
DVD Player
Main Speaker
TV
Subwoofer
Center Speaker Rear Center
Speaker
Rear Speaker
CONNECTION
GUIDE
L
R
V
S
O
Analog audio signal
Optical digital signal
S video signal
Video signal
Signal flow
V817920
COMPONENT VIDEO
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
FRONT :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
FRONT :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
PRE OUT/MAIN IN
MAIN OUT
Y
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
S VIDEO VIDEO
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
D-TV
/LD
MAIN IN
REAR (SURROUND)
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
REARCENTER
MAIN
+
+
–
+
–
–
+
–
REAR
CENTER
RS-232C
(SURROUND)
REAR
CENTER
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
SIGNAL GND
6CH INPUT
CENTER
MAIN
SURROUND
AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CBL
/SAT
CD
D-TV
/LD
DVD
CD-R
CD-R
MD/
TAPE
CD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SUB
WOOFER
CD
OUT (REC)
CD-R
IN (PLAY)
OUT (REC)
MD/TAPE
IN (PLAY)
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AB
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
A
B
4
3
4
1
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
V
V
O
Right Left
Right Left
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
■ Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition
like; the operating range of the remote control
decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light
becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them
immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or
letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit (see page 8).
4 INPUT MODE
Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,
DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is
connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see
page 26). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is
selected as the input source.
5 INPUT l / h
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
6 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
7 PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
8 BASS EXTENSION
Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each
time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass
frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB
(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This
boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.
However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN
SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/
BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.
9 PROCESSOR DIRECT
Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at
each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS,
TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed,
eliminating any alteration of the original signal.
0 SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its
corresponding button is pressed.
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AU X
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
1
23
45
6
78
9
q
w
e
r
t
i
0
y u
5
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
V
O
L
U
M
E
N
A
T
UR
AL SO
UN
D A
V AM
PL
IFIER
YA
MAHA
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
q BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right
main channels.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the low-frequency response.
w TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right
main channels.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and
right main speakers.
e REC OUT
Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video
recorder.
r STEREO/EFFECT
Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.
When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are
directed to the main left and right speakers without effect
sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and
right speakers.
t PROGRAM l / h
Selects the DSP program.
y 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons on the remote control).
u NEXT — SET MENU –/+
Changes the SET MENU settings.
i VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
■ Opening and closing the front
panel door
When you are not operating the controls behind the front
panel door, close the door.
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
w
e
r
t
9
q
y
u
i
o
p
d
g
f
s
j
k
h
a
Remote Control
This section describes the controls and their functions of
the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES” on pages 37 to 49 for operating other
components with this remote control.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 RE-NAME
Used for changing the input source name in the display
window (see page 42).
3 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
4 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
6 Display window
Shows the selected source component that you are
controlling.
7 SOURCE SELECT k/n
Selects the another component to control independently
from the input that has been selected by pressing an input
selector button.
8 LIGHT
Turns the light on or off. When you press this button
once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again
to turn off the light.
9 10KEY/DSP
Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode.
0 Operation buttons
Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for
operating your other components selected by the input
selector buttons.
q 6.1/ES
Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES
decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position.
w LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets
the level.
e ON SCREEN
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor.
r SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
t TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
y CLEAR
Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn
and rename features, programmed macros, and set
manufacturer codes (see pages 42 to 44).
u LEARN
Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for
programming the functions of other remote controls (see
pages 38 and 39).
7
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
SET MENU
PHONES
NEXT
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER
TREBLE REC OUT
– +
DIGITAL
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
EFFECT
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
–
+
30°30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
i MACRO
Used to program a series of operations for control by a
single button (see pages 40 to 42).
o MACRO ON/OFF
Turns the macro function on and off.
p Å and ı
Switch the control area for the extra components that are
not connected to this unit without changing the input.
a Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
s 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
d DSP program/Numeric buttons
Select DSP programs or numbers according to the
position of 10KEY/DSP.
f MUTE
Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the
MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level.
g VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
h STEREO/EFFECT
Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.
When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are
directed to the main left and right speakers without effect
sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and
right speakers.
j PARAMETER/SET MENU
Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode.
k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+
Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET
MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/
SET MENU.
Using the Remote Control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
– dusty places; or
– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
RL
LCR
RC RR
LFE
VIRTUAL
DTS
Neo
MOVIE THEATER
ENTERTAINMENT12
:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO
LOGIC
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
DISCRETE
PCM
1
SILENT
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
P. DIRECT
BASS
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
D
6.1
/
ES
PRO LOGIC
/
AB
67 0 q wer
12 345
89
1 Processor indicators
When any function of
DSP
, DTS, DISCRETE,
VIRTUAL, g,
6.1
/
ES
, and
PRO LOGIC
/
is
activated, its indicator lights up.
2 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
3 SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
4 MUTE indicator
Flashes up while the MUTE function is on.
5 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
6 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
7 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
8 SP A B indicators
Lights up according to which set of main speakers is
selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of
speakers are selected.
9 SILENT indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound
effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 29).
0 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when
the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
q Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
w BASS indicator
Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on.
e P. DIRECT
Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on.
r Input channel indicator
Indicates the channel components of input signals being
received.
Front Panel Display
9
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
AC OUTLETS
RS-232C
+
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT/MAIN IN
MAIN OUT
Y
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
TUNER
S VIDEO VIDEO
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
D-TV
/LD
MAIN IN
REAR (SURROUND)
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
REARCENTER
MAIN
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
–
+
–
REAR
CENTER
(SURROUND)
REAR
CENTER
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
GND
6CH INPUT
CENTER
MAIN
SURROUND
AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CBL
/SAT
CD
D-TV
/LD
DVD
CD-R
CD-R
MD/
TAP E
CD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SUB
WOOFER
CD
OUT (REC)
CD-R
IN (PLAY)
OUT (REC)
MD/TAPE
IN (PLAY)
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
A
B
4
3
4
1
2
12 3 4 5 6
782 9 0q
(Europe model)
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 Audio component jacks
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
4 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
5 RS232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.
Consult your dealer for details.
6 AC INLET (Europe model only)
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cord.
7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
8 6CH INPUT jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
9 Speaker terminals
See pages 11 and 12 for connection information.
0 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the
standby mode before you change the setting of this
switch.
q AC OUTLETS
Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V
components (see page 19).
Rear Panel
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right
main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center
and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of
speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system,
the tone of a moving human voice and other types of
sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you
use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers
with the same tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center
speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For
precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the
models of equivalent performance with the main
speakers.
■ Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.
The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
PREPARATION
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
■ Main speakers
Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
■ Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
• If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will
be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see
page 51 for details).
■ Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the
floor.
■ Rear center speaker
Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left
and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor
as the rear speakers.
■ Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall
reflections.
CAUTION
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with a monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
Main
speaker (L)
1.8 m (6 feet)
Rear speaker (L)
Rear center
speaker
Rear speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Main speaker (R)Center speaker
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
12
Connecting the Speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage this unit and/or speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
■ Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One of the cables is colored or
shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
10 mm (3/8”)
■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either
of the MAIN A or B terminals.
■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
3
1
2
12
SPEAKER SETUP
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
AC OUTLETS
RS-232C
+
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT/MAIN IN
MAIN OUT
Y
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
S VIDEO VIDEO
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
D-TV
/LD
MAIN IN
REAR (SURROUND)
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
REARCENTER
MAIN
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
–
+
–
REAR
CENTER
(SURROUND)
REAR
CENTER
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
GND
6CH INPUT
CENTER
MAIN
SURROUND
AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CBL
/SAT
CD
D-TV
/LD
DVD
CD-R
CD-R
MD/
TAP E
CD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SUB
WOOFER
CD
OUT (REC)
CD-R
IN (PLAY)
OUT (REC)
MD/TAPE
IN (PLAY)
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
A
B
4
3
4
1
TUNER
2
1
45 6 7
23
Subwoofer
system
Rear Center
speaker
Main B speaker
Center
speaker
(Europe model)
Right
Rear speaker
Right Left
Main A speaker
Right Left
Left
4
5
3
1
2
7
6
The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room.
■ SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The
LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are
assigned to this jack.
Notes
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the
remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61).
• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from
the SUBWOOFER jack.
13
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
AC OUTLETS
+
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL
SET BEFORE POWER ON
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
+
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
Switch
position
Upper
Lower
Speaker
Main
Center
Rear
Center
Rear
Main
Center
Rear
Center
Rear
Impedance level
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
switch
(Europe model)
■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit
may be damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch
only when this unit is in the standby mode.
14
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions
for each component to be connected to this unit.
• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling
system to all its products.
• After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
Connecting Video Components
■ About the video jacks
There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video
signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.
The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) video signals. The jacks are also separated
into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component
(e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y, P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.
If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the
S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks
on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
y
• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite
video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite
video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively.
• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according
to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages
56 and 57 for details).
Notes
• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when
connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being
connected.
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
These jacks are used to connect any video input source
such as a game console and a video camera to this unit.
S VIDEO VIDEO
L AUDIO R OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
Game console or video camera
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
P
B
/ C
B
Y
VIDEO jack
(composite)
COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks
S VIDEO
jack
15
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DIGITAL INPUT
GND
6CH INPUT
CENTER
MAIN
SURROUND
AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT
PHONO
CD
CD-R
CD-R
MD/
TAPE
CD
OPTICAL
SUB
WOOFER
CD
OUT (REC)
CD-R
IN (PLAY)
OUT (REC)
MD/TAPE
IN (PLAY)
R
L
1
2
3
4
7
3
4
3
4
1
D-TV
/LD
DVD
5
6
COAXIAL
CBL
/SAT
8
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO
DVD
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEOS VIDEO
R
L
VIDEOAUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/LD
A
B
TUNER
2
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
RF
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
RF
INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
INPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
L
R
C
*1
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
L
R
L
R
V
S
C
O
L
R
S
L
R
O
VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
V
S
S S
V
V
V
S
L
S
R
V
C
O
(Europe model)
LD player
RF
demodulator
*1 If your LD player has an RF
OUTPUT jack, first connect it to
the RF INPUT on an RF
demodulator and then connect
the RF OUTPUT on an RF
demodulator to the COAXIAL
jack on this unit.
indicates S-video cables
indicates video cables
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
Video monitor
VCR 1 or VCR 2/
DVR (digital
video recorder)
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
DVD player
TV/digital TV or
LD player
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting Audio Components
■ Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to
both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given
to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
y
• You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to
your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET
MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details).
Note
• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
■ Connecting a CD player
y
• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a
CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.
• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and
OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from
the COAXIAL CD jack.
■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape
deck or CD recorder
y
• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are
independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL
OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.
• When you connect your recording component to both the
analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given
to the digital signal.
Notes
• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may
distort the sound from other components.
• When you record from a source component connected to this
unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded
sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this
unit.
17
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DIGITAL INPUT
D-TV
/LD
DVD
5
6
COAXIAL
CBL
/SAT
8
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO
DVD
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEOS VIDEO
R
L
VIDEOAUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/LD
A
B
MD/
TAPE
2
1
CD-R
OPTICAL
CENTER
MAIN
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
PHONO
CD
OUT (REC)
CD-R
IN (PLAY)
3
4
1
OUT (REC)
MD/TAPE
IN (PLAY)
R
L
3
4
AUDIO
6CH INPUT
GND
CD-R
CD
3
4
CD
7
TUNER
2
L
L
R
OUTPUT
GND
L
R
L R
L R
INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
L
R
C
O
O
L R
O
O
DIGITAL OUTPUT
L
R
C
O
(Europe model)
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
External decoder
See page 18
Turntable
CD player
CD recorder
MD recorder or
tape deck
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting to an External
Amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows.
Note
• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN
IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary
to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
1 MAIN OUT/IN jacks
MAIN OUT jacks .... Main channel line output jacks.
The signals output through these
jacks are affected by VOLUME,
BASS, TREBLE, and BASS
EXTENSION settings.
MAIN IN jacks ........ Line input to this unit’s Main
channel amplifiers.
When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the
preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main
amplifier of this unit.
2 REAR CENTER jack
Rear center channel line output jack.
3 CENTER jack
Center channel line output jack.
4 SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system
to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,
center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they
are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this
jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals
generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also
directed if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by
using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE
LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61).
• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE
LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output
from the SUBWOOFER jack.
5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks
Rear channel line output jacks.
PRE OUT/MAIN IN
MAIN OUT MAIN IN
REAR (SURROUND)
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
REAR
CENTER
R
L
R
L
1 2
3 45
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left
and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND
and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from
an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of
“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except
for 1F MAIN LEVEL).
19
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Power Supply
Cords
(Europe model)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
REAR :
REAR CENTER :
CENTER
:
MAIN A OR B
:
A B :
+
+
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
■ Connecting the AC power cord
[Europe model]
Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all
connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the
wall outlet.
Caution
• Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided.
Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical shock.
[U.K. model]
Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Europe model ............................................... 3 OUTLETS
U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS
is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM
POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply
power to any connected component whenever this unit is
turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLETS is 100 W.
Turning on the Power
When all connections are completed, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
The level of the main volume, and then the current
DSP program name appear on the front panel
display.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
STANDBY
/
ON
1
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
1
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
or
Remote control
Front panel
To AC outlet
20
Selecting the OSD Mode
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control
repeatedly to change the display mode.
The OSD mode changes in the following order: full
display, short display, and display off.
Notes
• If you choose a video input source that has a component
connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN
jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO
OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is
output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.
However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no
video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video
and composite video signals.
• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to
connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see
the OSD.
• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or
video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.
P01 CONCERT HALL 1
ROOM SIZE…………1.O
LIVENESS…………………5
INIT.DLY…………30ms
≥ Europe Hall A
P01 CONCERT HALL 1
Europe Hall A
PARAMETER
SET MENU
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)
You can display the operation information for this unit on
a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP
program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier
to see the available options and parameters than it is by
reading this information on the front panel display.
y
• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is
superimposed over the image.
• The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will
not be recorded with any video signal.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when
a video source is not being reproduced (or the source
component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the
SET MENU (see page 60).
OSD Modes
You can change the amount of information the OSD
shows.
Full display
This mode always shows the DSP program parameter
settings on the video monitor.
Short display
This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front
panel display at the bottom of the screen and then
disappears.
Display off
This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at
the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,
no changes to operations appear on the monitor except
those of the ON SCREEN button.
Full display Short display
y
• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,
VOLUME and some other types of operation information are
displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that
for the front panel display.
• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the
OSD mode.
21
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Item
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D REAR CT SP
1E LFE/BASS OUT
1F MAIN LEVEL
Description
Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is
being used and its performance.
Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main
speakers.
Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers
are being used and their performance.
Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center
speaker is being used and its performance.
Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass
signal.
Selects the main speaker level.
Control value (default
setting indicated in bold)
LRG/SML/NONE
LARGE/SMALL
LRG/SML/NONE
LRG/SML/NONE
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
Normal/–10 dB
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your
configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings
as well as other possible settings.
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F
If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,
change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 51 to 54.
22
4 Set PARAMETER/SET
MENU on the remote
control to PARAMETER.
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY
SUR.)
Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6
speakers required for a surround sound system. The
adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at
your listening position with the remote control.
1 Press TEST to output the
test tone.
2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test
tone.
The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,
center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,
rear center speaker and left rear speaker in order. The
tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time.
This section explains how to adjust the speaker output
levels by using the test tone generator. When this
adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound
field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital,
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic
, DTS, DTS ES, and
DTS Neo: 6).
Note
• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Begin
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of the
main speakers, press both A
and B.
3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the
front panel to the center position and turn off
BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR
DIRECT by pressing the buttons.
“BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear
on the front panel display.
TEST
BASS
TREBLE
– +– +
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
2
3
1, 4
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
SPEAKERS
AB
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
Set to OFF.
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
2
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
2
33
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
4
PARAMETER
SET MENU
VOLUME
VOLUME
Front panel
or
Remote control
23
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONSADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
Notes
• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using
“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 55).
• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
center channel sound is automatically output from the left and
right main speakers.
• If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be
adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order
of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right
and left speakers and the rear center speaker.
• If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 3.
The test tone will be circulated in the order of
LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT
SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker.
y
• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as
long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening
to or watching the input source with the desired volume by
adjusting the volume key.
• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers
(center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the
output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main
speakers even after you have increased the output level of these
speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET
MENU to –10 dB (see page 54). This setting decreases the
main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal
level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET
MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear
speakers again.
The state of the test tone output is also shown on the
monitor by an image of the audio listening room.
This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.
Front panel display also indicates from which
speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST
LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→
TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR.
Note
• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this
unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
3 Press –/+ repeatedly to
adjust the output level of
the effect speakers so that
the output level coming
from each speaker is the
same.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the
selected speaker.
y
• You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n.
4 When the adjustment is
complete, press TEST to
stop the test tone.
LEFT
TEST DOLBY SUR.
LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND
CENTER
REAR CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
TEST
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit if you will play video sources.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of
main speakers, press both A
and B. The speaker indicator(s)
for the selected set(s) lights up
on the front panel display.
4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the
input selector buttons on the remote control)
to select the input source.
• The selected input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display for a few
seconds.
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the
front panel display.
Notes
• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other
source can be played. To select another input source with
INPUT l / h (one of the input selector buttons), press 6CH
INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display.
• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press 6CH INPUT.
INPUT
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
DSP
10KEY
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
1
7
4
6
PHONO
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DVD AUTO
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
STANDBY
/
ON
1
6
46
4
3
6
7
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
SPEAKERS
AB
or
or
Remote control
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
Selected input source
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
Remote controlFront panel
or
25
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music
while having beautiful scenery from the video source on
the video monitor.
Select a source from the video group and then select a
source from the audio group with the input selector
buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV
cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel.
■ To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To resume the audio output,
press MUTE again.
y
• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as
VOLUME +/–.
• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front
panel display.
■ When you have finished using
this unit
Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the
remote control) to set this unit in the
standby mode.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS
EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for
sound from the main speakers.
Note
• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR
OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the
reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be
lowered for the characteristics of AV component. In this case,
turn on the component.
7 Select a DSP program if desired.
Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on
the remote control) to select a DSP program. See
pages 30 to 35 for details about the DSP program.
PHONO
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
VOLUME
VOLUME
BASS
TREBLE
– +– +
BASS
EXTENSION
Front panel
or
Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
or
STANDBY
Front panel
Remote control
MUTE
PROGRAM
or
HALL 1
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
Front panel Remote control
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
Input Modes and Indications
This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the
priority of the input signal among different types of input
signals.
When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode
is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU
(see page 57 for details).
Press INPUT MODE (the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display.
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the following
order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal
encoded with DTS is selected even if
another signal is input at the same time.
ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is
selected even if a digital signal is input at
the same time.
Notes
• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack
has precedence over the OPTICAL jack.
• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting.
• In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on
some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a
moment when playback resumes after a search because the
digital signal is selected again.
• When playing the LD source that has not been digitally
recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In
this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DVD AUTO
PHONO
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
Remote controlFront panel
or
Input mode
■ Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and
set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-
kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
– DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output
as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and
right main speakers.
Note
• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the
subwoofer.
–“Adjusting the Level of the Effect Speakers” described
on page 61 cannot be made.
■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs
• If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to perform
DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection
between this unit and the player.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may
reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In
this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and
set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with
the input mode set to AUTO;
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.)
after having detected the DTS signal. When playback
of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator
may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS
source can be played. If you want to play a normal
PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.
– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or
skip operation is performed while the DTS source is
playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If
this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this
unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”
mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”
indicator will turn off.
27
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a Sound Field Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs
available with this unit. However the selection depends on
the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are
possible for all input signal formats. For details about
each program, see pages 30 to 35.
1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on
the remote control.
2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP
program buttons on the remote control) to
select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display.
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
2
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1 2,3
3 After selecting the desired program, press
the same button repeatedly to select the
desired sub-program if available.
For example, to select the sub-program “DGTL Sci-
Fi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.
Notes
• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections
in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically
switches to the appropriate decoding program.
• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or
Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers
and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center
speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main
speakers.
• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
RL
LCR
RR
LFE
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DGTL Sci-Fi
PROGRAM
Sub-program name
Program name
Front panel
or
Remote control
RL
L C R
RR
LFE
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DGTL Spectacle
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
Program name
Sub-program name
DSP
10KEY
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
3 Press the numeric button 12 repeatedly to
select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC
or Neo: 6.
The decoder selection switches among PRO LOGIC,
PRO LOGIC and Neo: 6 on the front panel
display.
4 After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC
or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the
source by pressing the numeric button 11.
The selection switches as follow;
PRO LOGIC
Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music
(when PRO LOGIC
is selected)
Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music
(when Neo: 6 is selected)
■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix
6.1 or DTS ES software
Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or
DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1
and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker.
The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 →
OFF each time the 6.1/ES button is pressed.
Notes
• No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you
have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE.
• The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-
channel source also.
Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6
You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or
six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC
or Neo:
6 in the program No. 11.
1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback
on the source component.
2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6
(Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l /
h on the front panel.
(For remote control only)
2 Press the numeric button 11 on the remote
control.
The previously selected sub program appears on the
front panel display.
LR
PRO
LOGIC
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
PRO LOGIC
/
A
PRO LOGIC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
Remote control
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
2
2,3,4
PROGRAM
Front panel
6.1/ES
CHP/INDEX
The “ c ” indicator lights up.
RL
LCR
RC RR
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
6.1
/
ES
A
Spectacle 6.1
29
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ Normal Stereo Reproduction
Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound
effect for normal stereo reproduction.
Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound
effect back on.
Notes
• If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the
center speaker, rear speakers and rear center speaker.
• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU
to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
■ Displaying the information about
the input source
You can display the information such as the type, format
and sampling frequency of the signal input from the
component connected to this unit.
1 Select the input source you want to obtain
the information about by pressing an input
selector button.
2 Press STEREO/EFFECT to
light STEREO.
3 Press k/n to display the information about
the input signal.
AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby
Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS
ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in
the input source that this unit can detect.
Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1
channel sources.
Disc6.1: This mode can be selected only when the
source with DTS ES Discrete format has
been detected.
Mtrx6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the
input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder.
OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this
mode. (Except for when the DSP program
“6ch Stereo” or “Neo: 6” is selected.)
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP
With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the
DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual
speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP
program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET
MENU to NONE.
Note
• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:
– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic
Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is
selected;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
– when using the test tone; or
– when connecting the headphones.
SILENT CINEMA DSP
You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were
actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can
listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound
field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the
headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the
front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to
the source with normal stereo reproduction.)
Notes
• This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if
the sound effect is on;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the
headphone.
STEREO
EFFECT
STEREO
EFFECT
Front panel
or
Remote control
PHONO
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
STEREO
EFFECT
PARAMETER
SET MENU
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
30
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)
Understanding Sound Fields
A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a
particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear
early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound
produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and
other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives
each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.
YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to
measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music
venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the
direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then
we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this
unit.
■ Recreating a sound field
Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your
listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound
field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.
The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the
virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
No.
1
2
3
CONCERT HALL 1
CONCERT HALL 2
CHURCH
Europe Hall A
Europe Hall B
U.S.A. Hall C
Live Concert
Freiburg
Royaumont
Features
This is a large fan-shaped concert hall with approximately 2500 seats.
There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads
finely and beautifully.
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats
located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The
listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features
a fairly traditional European design. The middle and high frequencies
are richly and beautifully reinforced.
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced
reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The
sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the
center, close to the stage.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church located
in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early
reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining
hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on
the outskirts of Paris.
Program
31
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)
No.
4
5
6
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
ENTERTAINMENT
Village Gate
The Bottom Line
The Roxy Theatre
Arena
Disco
6ch Stereo
Features
This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement
and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at
the center left of the hall.
This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right
in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center-left of the hall.
A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long
delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily
spacious feel of a large arena.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated.
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a
sound field suitable for background music at parties.
Program
32
CINEMA-DSP
Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP
Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread
even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with
the images on the screen.
CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP
integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field
programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In
CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and
Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,
and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.
When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the
most suitable sound field program for that signal.
L SURROUND SOUND FIELD
R SURROUND SOUND FIELD
PRESENCE SOUND FIELD
DIALOG
EFFECT MUSIC
In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6
decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or
DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and
the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.
33
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality
sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a
dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or
DTS technology.
■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect
These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround and right surround channels. This processing
enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field
and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-
equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear
separation of all channels.
■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect
These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center
DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.
■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect
Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and
surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround
matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.
These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed
to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of
sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding
processes.
■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6
Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five
discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/
CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source.
Surround DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
34
CINEMA-DSP
CINEMA-DSP Programs
■ For movie programs: No. 9 to 11
According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field
pattern.
Table of Program Names for Each Input Format
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC
DTS Neo: 6
2 channel
Stereo
70 mm Spectacle
70 mm Sci-Fi
70 mm Adventure
70 mm General
—
—
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
Movie
Music
Cinema
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL
DGTL Spectacle
DGTL Sci-Fi
DGTL Adventure
DGTL General
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5.1 channel
DTS
DTS Spectacle
DTS Sci-Fi
DTS Adventure
DTS General
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
DTS ES
Spectacle ES
Sci-Fi ES
Adventure ES
General ES
—
—
ES Matrix 6.1
ES Discrete 6.1
*
2
Enhanced ES
—
—
—
—
—
—
6.1 channel *
1
Input
Program
DOLBY DIGITAL
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*1 means the 6.1/ES decoder is ON.
*2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input.
y
• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically
switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the
remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected.
• 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the
program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.
• When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for
5.1 channel.
Note
• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode.
No.
9
10
11
35
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
Program
Enhanced Mode
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
Note
• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.
No.
9
10
11
Features
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It
precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of
science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the
silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the
newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as
much as possible.
This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,
and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is
relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the
echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from
the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
General
No.
6
7
8
ENTERTAINMENT
CONCERT VIDEO
TV THEATER
Game
Pop/Rock
Opera
Mono Movie
Variety/Sports
Features
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as
if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by
restraining excessive reverberation.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces
beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such
as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to
create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround
sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With
this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as
news, variety shows, music programs, or sports programs.
Program
■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 6 to 8
36
BASIC RECORDING
REC OUT allows you to record one source while
watching and/or listening to another source.
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power to this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from by using REC OUT.
• To record the current input source that you are
watching or listening to, set REC OUT to
SOURCE.
• To record the other source than the one that you
are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to the
source you want to record.
Note
• At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch
during recording by pressing INPUT l/h (one of the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
• Setting REC OUT to SOURCE and using the BGV function
(see page 25) allows the recording of audio and video from a
different source.
Notes
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,
VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP
programs does not affect the recorded material.
• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal by your VCR.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
■ Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your
player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its
operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog
signal will be output from the player.
■ Timer playback/recording
This unit can perform playback or recording with an
external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation
instruction for the component and the timer to be used.
Notes
• The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the
playback or recording with the timer.
• If you do not want any sound output during the recording with
a timer, turn the volume down.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so
on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if
the timer is turned off for more than one week, the
stored data will be lost.
BASS
SPEAKERS
A
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
B
VOLUME
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR
6CH
INPUT
OPTICAL
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
TREBLE
– +
DIGITAL
EFFECT
– +
PROGRAM
STEREO
SET MENU
NEXT
–
+
REC OUT
V-AUX
VCR2
/DVR
VCR1
PHONO
CD
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
2
VCR2
/DVR
V-AUX
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
D-TV/LD
DVD
SOURCE
REC OUT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
CD
PHONO
VCR2
/DVR
V-AUX
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
D-TV/LD
DVD
SOURCE
REC OUT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
CD
PHONO
37
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To
control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes.
This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire
functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with
an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for
operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features
make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room.
Notes
• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7.
• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.
Control Area
■ Control area of this unit
The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown
below. You can use the functions within this area no
matter which component control area is selected.
■ Control area for each component
The component control area is the shaded area shown
below. Each component has different functions for the
operation buttons in the component control area. The
component which has been chosen by pressing an input
selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be
controlled and the display window shows the
corresponding name of the component to be operated.
Input selector buttons and Å/
ı buttons switch the control
area for each component.
* Å/ı buttons are to operate
the other components that are
not connected to this unit. Å
and ı buttons cannot be used
as an input selector button.
Factory setting:
Å ........... LD player
ı ..... Satellite tuner
Component control area
There are 13 component control areas (See pages 45 to 49). You can
set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control
functions in each area. See pages 38 to 39.
Input selector
buttons, and Å/ı
buttons
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
DSP
10KEY
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
SELECT
SOURCE
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
POWER
POWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV MUTE
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
1
5
9
SOUND
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOP
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CH
PRESET
DISC
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
SEARCH
PLAY
– +
ENTER
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
POWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV MUTE
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
1
5
9
SOUND
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOP
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CH
PRESET
DISC
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
SEARCH
PLAY
– +
ENTER
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
DSP is selected
10 key is selected
38
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select the source component you want to set
up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Notes
• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning
process is started.
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,
the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 2.
3 Press k / n to select the name of your
component’s manufacturer.
You will find the names of most worldwide audio-
video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the
display window.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different component from the input selector
name.
Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE,
TUNER, AMP, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR
Note
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes,
try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it
works following step 4.
4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
check if it works for the component being
set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting
has been correctly made.
y
• If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.
5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Notes
• If you have already programmed a remote control function for
a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes
priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function.
•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;
– when pressing more than one button at once; or
– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET
MENU is switched to another position.
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can control other components by setting a
manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each
component control area.
The following table shows factory-set component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area. If you are to make a setting for different
component from the factory setting, change the library as
described in step 3 on right.
LEARN
LEARN
Input area
A
B
PHONO
TUNER
CD
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
D-TV/LD
VCR 1
VCR 2/DVR
DVD
Component category
(Library)
LD
SATELLITE TUNER
TV
TUNER
CD
VCR
CABLE
MD
CD-R
TV
VCR
VCR
DVD
Manufacturer
YAMAHA
–
–
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
–
–
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
–
–
–
YAMAHA
ENTER
6CH INPUT
SOUND
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
39
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” is displayed.
6 Press and hold the button on the other
remote control that has the function you
want to program into this remote control
until “OK” appears in the display window.
Notes
•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has
not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5.
• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.
However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In
this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make
further learning on the remote control.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional
functions.
8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
Notes
• It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit
with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program
functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a
DSP program.
• If the batteries in the other remote control are weak, they may
not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote
control.
• When the remote controls are either too close together or too
far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.
• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.
•“ERROR” appears in the display window in the following
circumstances:
– when pressing more than one button at once; or
– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.
Programming a New Remote
Control Function (Learn Feature)
If you want to program functions not included in the basic
operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a
manufacturer code is not available, the following
procedure needs to be performed. The possible
programming area is the same as a component control
area, so the buttons are programmable independently for
each source component area.
Note
• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn
most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you
may not be able to program some special signals or extremely
long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the
other remote control.)
1 Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY.
2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select a source component.
3 Place this remote control and the other
remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a
flat surface so that their infrared transmitters
are aimed at each other.
4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three
seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer
code setting mode.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5
and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start
over from step 4.
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
SOURCE
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch)
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
SOURCE
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
LEARN
LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
SOURCE
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
DSP
10KEY
Flashes alternately
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
40
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Using the Macro Feature
The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when
you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to
start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The
macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see pages 41 and 42).
*1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those
components to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit
depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.)
*2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when
you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the
TV is turned off.
*3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders,
DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the
PLAY button on the control area of that component (see page 39) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 38).
*4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby
mode.
(DVD area) (*3)
Press one of the macro buttons
Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially
CD
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
PLAY
(CD area)
Macro buttons
PHONO
V-AUX
TUNER
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
DVD
A
B
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
First Second
–
–
–
Third
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
PHONO
V-AUX
TUNER
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
DVD
SYSTEM
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
PLAY
(*1)
(D-TV/LD area) (*2)
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
(MD/TAPE area) (*3)
(CD-R area) (*3)
(CD area) (*3)
(VCR 1 area) (*3)
(VCR 2/DVR area) (*3)
(*4)
41
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
2 Press a macro button for which you want to
program the macro operation.
The button you chose for programming the macro
operation and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Note
•“AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other
than the macro buttons is pressed.
y
• If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE
SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the
input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a
macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes
the component.
3 Press the buttons of the functions that you
want to include in the macro operation
sequence in order.
y
• You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10
steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically
exits from the macro mode.
Note
•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has
not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2.
■ Operating the macro
1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.
2 Press a macro button.
Notes
• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO
ON/OFF to OFF.
• While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does
not receive any other button’s function until the macro
operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops
flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation has been completed.
■ Programming a macro
You can program your own macros and use the Macro
feature to transmit many remote control commands by
pressing a single button.
Notes
• The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used
again when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the
factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro
contents.
• A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or
YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a
macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or
program a function with the remote control for your
component.
• This remote control handles button signals that operate
continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval
codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro
steps are therefore not recommended.
1 Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2
and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this
happens, start over from step 1.
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
POWER
Macro buttons
MACRO
MACRO ON/OFF
MACRO
indicate the number
of macro steps you
entered
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
POWER
1
2
MCR 2 : DVD p
MCR 1 : DVD a
appear alternately so that you can
set up the next step
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
42
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
RE-NAME
4 Press MACRO again when
the operation sequence
you want to program is
complete.
Note
•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– when pressing more than one button at once; or
– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.
Memory back-up
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
Changing the Source Name in the
Display Window
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use the
different name from the original input selector button
names. This is useful when different component is set in
the input selector button.
1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select the source component you want to
rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press RE-NAME by using
a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character in the following
order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and /
(slash). (Pressing k goes in the reverse order.)
4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.
RE-NAME
ENTER
ENTER
y
• If you continuously want to rename another source component,
press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.
5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the
renaming mode.
MACRO
Clearing Learned Functions,
Macros, Renamed Source Names,
and Setup Manufacturer Codes
1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select the source component you want to
clear the function, Macros, renamed source
names or manufacturer codes.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,
the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from
step 1.
CLEAR
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
43
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
The mode is shown in the display window in the
following order:
4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
Note
•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function or macro
for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.
Note
•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;
– when pressing more than one button at once; or
– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET
MENU is switched to another position.
CLEAR
CLEAR
Clearing a Learned Function or
Macro
You can clear the function learned in a certain
programmable button in each area.
■ To clear a learned function
1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select the source component you want to
clear the function.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,
the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 2.
3 Press the button that you want to clear for 3
seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
4 Press LEARN again to exit
from the learning mode.
■ To clear the macro function
1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to
select the source component for which you
want to clear the function.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
LEARN
CLEAR
Clears all programmed functions
including setup manufacturer
codes. This returns to the
factory settings.
(L: name of a component) Clears
all learned functions for the
component area. Press the input
selector button, Å or ı to select
the component.
Clears all learned functions for
this unit control area.
Clears all learned functions.
Clears all programmed macros.
Clears all renamed source
names in the display window.
LEARN
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
44
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Pressing n always selects OPTN first
SELECT
SOURCE
■ SOURCE SELECT k / n
You can control another component independently from
the input you have selected by pressing an input selector
button.
Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the
component and set the remote control to be
used for it.
The display window will show one of the following:
(when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO,
V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or
digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner),
VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.
y
• Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot
select OPTN.
■ OPTN (option) area
OPTN is an extra component control area that can be
programmed with other remote control functions.
Note
• You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See
page 38 for the programming procedure.
2 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro
by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint
pen or similar object, and at the same time
press the button for which you want to clear
the macro for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
y
• You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time
by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons
for which those learned functions or macros have been
programmed.
Note
•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again.
4 Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing
mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function or macro
for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.
MACRO
MACRO
CLEAR
6CH INPUT
SOUND
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
45
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Each Component Control Area
The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component
you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to
select a component you want to control.
■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area)
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
TV
THEATER
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAU S ESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-
TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas)
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-
TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
DISPLAY
DISC +/– (disc skip)
STOP
*
Title/Index
TITLE
MENU
Return
POWER
SEARCH
Menu cursor/ENTER
Audio
Skip
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric buttons
Clear
CH +/– (channel)
SEARCH
POWER
Record
(Press twice to start recording)
TV/Video input
*
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric buttons
46
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/
SAT area)
Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 38 because TV is
factory-set for this input selector button.
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in PHONO.
* SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the
manufacturer code is set in VCR 1.
■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area)
CH +/– (channel)
DISPLAY
POWER
Enter
TV INPUT
TV VOL +/–
TV MUTE
*
Numeric buttons
Clear
DISPLAY
SEARCH
POWER
STOP
Chapter/Time
*
SOUND
CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search)
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric buttons
47
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
■ Operating a CD player (CD area)
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-
TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area)
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-
TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
DISC +/– (disc skip)
DISPLAY
SEARCH
POWER
STOP
INDEX
*
Skip
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric buttons
Clear
DISPLAY
SEARCH
POWER
STOP
INDEX
(CD-R only)
*
Skip
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric buttons
Clear
(CD-R only)
Record
(MD only)
48
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area)
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the
manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-
TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)
SEARCH
(backward/forward)
Record
STOP
INDEX
(MD only)
A/B
Direction A/B
PLAY
PAUSE
Numeric button
(MD only)
Display
POWER
*
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
POWER
Preset group A/B/C/D/E
Preset number 1 to 8 *
PRESET +/–
* These buttons function when the manufacturer code “Yama2” is set up.
49
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Operating the component set in
Å or ı
These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this
unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white buttons area shown below can be used for the
component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component.
YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the
manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting
procedure described on page 38.
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAUSESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
EFFECT
TV MUTE
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AUX
POWER
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
+
+
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
The functions of these buttons in the
component control area differ for the
component you set in Å or ı.
50
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
1 Set PARAMETER/SET
MENU to SET MENU.
2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to
14) you want to adjust.
3 Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the video
monitor or on the front panel display.
Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub
item.
2 LOW FRQ TEST
≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1
2,3,5
3,4
5
The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the
speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and
parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate
item and adjust or select the values as necessary.
y
• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU
while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video
monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit
while adjusting the items.
Note
• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of
the OSD.
1 SPEAKER SET
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D REAR CT SP
1E LFE/BASS OUT
1F MAIN LEVEL
2 LOW FRQ TEST
3 L/R BALANCE
4 HP TONE CTRL
5 CENTER GEQ
6 INPUT RENAME
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT
7A CMPNT-V INPUT
7B OPTICAL OUT
7C OPTICAL IN
7D COAXIAL IN
8 INPUT MODE
9 PARAM. INI
10 LFE LEVEL
11 D-RANGE
12 SP DELAY TIME
13 DISPLAY SET
14 MEMORY GUARD
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE………OFF
SET MENU 1/4
≥ 2 LOW FRQ TEST
3 L/R BALANCE
4 HP TONE CTRL
/ : Up/Down
-/+ : Enter
1 SPEAKER SET
51
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of
the item.
5 Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP
program appears or simply press one of the
DSP program group buttons to exit from the
SET MENU.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from
the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than
one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE…………ON
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
HALL 1
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those
in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected.
• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.
■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
this unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center
speaker depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E
LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signal are directed to the left and right
main speakers.
or
52
SET MENU
LARGE SMALL
1B MAIN SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LARGE SMALL
1B MAIN SP
■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending
on how you set this item.
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the left and right main channel signal is directed
to the left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS
OUT”.
Note
• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are
directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the
main speaker mode.
■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker
mode)
The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers
depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
left and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E
LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.
53
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center
speaker mode)
By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker
configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-
to-back and transitions.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The
entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to
the rear center speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
center channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of
the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and
right rear speakers.
■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out
mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-
frequency signals are directed to both main right and left
speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for
both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals
are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix
the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE
signals.
Note
• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,
center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE
channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A,
1B, 1C and 1D.
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
54
SET MENU
Normal -10dB
1F MAIN LEVEL
Normal -10dB
1F MAIN LEVEL
2 LOW FRQ TEST
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your
configuration. Change the setting with the remote control
while sitting in the listening position.
1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and
adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you
can hear the tone.
Notes
• Do not turn up the volume too high.
• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in
the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections
are correct.
2 Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to
select the speaker you want to compare with
the subwoofer.
If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will
not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will
not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.
The output mode of the test tone depends on the
settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.
3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to
select the frequency you want to use.
■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level
mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the
main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency
performance of the main speakers.
Choices: Normal, –10 dB
Initial setting: Normal
Normal
Select this if you can match the output level of your effect
speakers with that of your main speakers when using the
test tone.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone.
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE…………ON
2 LOW FRQ TEST
≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
≥ FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
55
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
5 CENTER GEQ
≥ 300Hz
1kHz
3kHz
10kHz
-+
+3dB
100Hz
4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL
(treble)
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic
equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches
that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the
100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.
Control range (dB): –6 to +6
Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band
1 Press n to select a higher frequency and k
to select a lower frequency.
2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that
frequency.
y
• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this
item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the
foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the
video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the
speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains
at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes
as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,
press TEST (see pages 22 and 23).
3 L/R BALANCE
0
-/+ : Adjust
/ : Exit
L
…………………… ……………………
R
4 HP TONE CTRL
TRBL
-
+
0dB
≥ BASS
5 CENTER GEQ
300Hz
1kHz
3kHz
10kHz
-+
0dB
≥ 100Hz
4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the
controls on the subwoofer so it matches that
of the speaker you are comparing it to.
■ About the test tone
The test tone is produced by the tone generator.
The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise
centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter.
You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through
250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.
You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the
subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency
characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency
sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,
speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other
conditions.
Digital generator
(wide band noise produced)
Band pass filter
35 Hz – 250 HzCenter freq.
Freq.
Noise
3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
left and right main speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the left and right main speakers.
Control range: 10 steps for L/R
Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R
Press + to decrease the output level for the
left main speaker. Press – for the right main
speaker.
56
SET MENU
6 INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input which
appears on the OSD or the front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT
l / h) to select the input you want to
change the name of.
2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
3 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and –/+ to move to the next one.
• Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order.
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,
*, +, and so on.
• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other
inputs.
Note
• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.
4 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT
RENAME.
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD1
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD
7A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B]……………D-TV/LD
≥ [A]…………… DVD
7B OPTICAL OUT
(2)…………… CD-R
≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (the input selector buttons on the remote
control).
■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks
[A] and [B]
Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD
[B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/
DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT
Initial settings: [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/LD
■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL
OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2)
Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO,
V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/
SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, TUNER
(2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/
DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD,
DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER
Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE
(2) CD-R
57
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
8 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn
on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input
mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL
INPUT jacks (3) to (6)
Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/
TAPE, CD-R, TUNER
(4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR,
VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,
MD/TAPE, TUNER
(5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD,
PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/
SAT, D-TV/LD, TUNER
(6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R,
CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, TUNER
Initial settings: (3) CD
(4) CD-R
(5) DVD
(6) D-TV/LD
■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL
INPUT jacks (7) and (8)
Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,
VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,
MD/TAPE, CD-R, TUNER
(8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/
TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,
VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, TUNER
Initial settings: (7) CD
(8) CBL/SAT
Note
• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
7D COAXIAL IN
≥ (8)………CBL/SAT
(7)…………… CD
8 INPUT MODE
-/+ : Select
/ : Exit
AUTO LAST
7C OPTICAL IN
(4)…………… CD-R
≥ (5)…………… DVD
(6)……………D-TV/LD
(3)…………… CD
58
SET MENU
9 PARAM. INI (parameter
initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP
program within a DSP program group. When you
initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter
values within that group revert to their initial settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for
the DSP program that you want to initialize.
The asterisk (*) next to the program number means
that the parameter values have been changed.
Notes
• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a
group separately.
• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if
you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk
mark (*).
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 60),
you cannot initialize any program groups.
• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot
automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.
10 LFE LEVEL
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes
Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the
low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and
HEADPHONE
Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and
HEADPHONE
1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted.
2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level.
Note
• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones.
9 PARAM. INI
* 5 678
9 *10 11
Press No. Key
1 23*4
10 LFE LEVEL
HEADPHONE…………0dB
≥ SPEAKER………………0dB
10 LFE LEVEL
HEADPHONE…………0dB
≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB
59
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
L
C
C
RC
R
RL
RR
RC
12 SP DELAY TIME
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the
Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this
unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the
Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the
same distance from the main listening position as the left
and right Main speakers. However, in most home
situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker
is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear
speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker
and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from
the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the
main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem
the same as the distance between the left and right Main
speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the
listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center
speaker is especially important for giving depth to the
dialogue.
Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER
0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER
Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER
3 ms for REAR CENTER
Press –/+ to increase or decrease the delay
of the center and the rear center channel
sounds.
Center speaker image
y
• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.
11 D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting
is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital
signals.
MAX
Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.
STD
Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.
MIN
Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at
extremely low volume levels.
11 D-RANGE
HP: MAX STD MIN
≥ SP: MAX STD MIN
12 SP DELAY TIME
REAR CNTR…………3ms
≥ CENTER…………………0ms
60
SET MENU
13 DISPLAY SET
■ BLUE BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a blue background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-
screen display if OFF is selected.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Initial setting: AUTO
■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)
This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the
OSD.
Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
Initial setting: 0
Press + to lower the position of the OSD.
Press – to raise the position of the OSD.
■ DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
14 MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
Notes
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone.
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select
any other SET MENU items.
13 DISPLAY SET
OSD SHIFT………………0
DIMMER………………………0
≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO
14 MEMORY GUARD
-/+ : Select
/ : Exit
OFF ON
61
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level.
• The control range for the center, left and right rear
or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to –20 dB.
y
• When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you
cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each
time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker
appears on the front panel display and you can check the
speaker level.
Notes
• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and
“1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS
OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be
adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers.
• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
• It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a
subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test
Tone on pages 22 and 23.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from
the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than
one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the
output level again.
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, left and right rear, rear center and subwoofer)
while listening to a music source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Set PARAMETER/SET
MENU to PARAMETER.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display as
follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and
subwoofer.
LEVEL
PARAMETER
SET MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
1
2
3
LEVEL
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
y
• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing n/k.
Center speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Left rear speaker output
level
Rear center speaker output
level
Right rear speaker output
level
62
3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the
front panel display after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the Sleep Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control
(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the
AC power cord from the AC outlet.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external components
connected to AC OUTLETS.
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
y
• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you
can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions
for the timer.
Setting the Sleep Timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time
before this unit
automatically turns off.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
PHONO
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-A UX
SLEEP
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SOUND
SYSTEM
CLEAR LEARN MACRO
OFF ON
MACRO
PHONO
A
B
CD
DVD
VCR2/DVR
VCR 1
TITLE
MENU
CHAPTER
PAU SESTOPPOWER
REC
HALL 1
DSP
10KEY
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
DISPLAY
SEARCH
SOURCE
PLAY
– +
ENTER
D-TV/LD
CBL/SAT
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
V-AU X
POWER
1
2
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
SLEEP 120min
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
CONCERT HALL1
SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.
SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF
SLEEP TIMER
SLEEP
63
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
What is a sound field?
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,
there are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or
a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as
shown in the diagram on page 65 for any particular
environment, and provide vital information to our ears.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of
a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
Sound Field Program Parameters
DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine
the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from
you to the performer, etc. In each program, these
parameters are set with values precisely calculated by
YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.
It is recommended to use DSP programs without
changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also
allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with
one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those
parameters.
Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you
to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment
to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters
correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create
the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or
other listening environment. The size of the room, for
example, affects the length of time between the early
reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in
many of the DSP programs alters the timing between
these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”
you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of
the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a
significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb
sound, for example, cause the reflections and
reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly
reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a
longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters
allow you to control these and many other factors that
contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to
essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.
provided to create custom-tailored listening environments
that ideally match your mood and music.
See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on
pages 65 to 68.
64
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
4 Press k / n to select the
parameter.
5 Press –/+ to change the
parameter value.
y
• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-
set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
Resetting a Parameter to the
Factory-set Value
■ To reset some of the parameters
to the factory-set values
Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and
hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factory-
set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name
disappears on the video monitor.
■ To reset all of the parameters to
the factory-set values
Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of
the parameter values of all DSP programs within the
selected group to the factory-set values (see page 58).
This operation resets all of the parameter values of all
DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.
Notes
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press k / n.
• You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY
GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to
change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to
OFF (see page 60).
Changing Parameter Settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set
parameters. Although you do not have to change the
initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
Adjustments should be made with the remote control.
y
• We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a
video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to
see the front panel display.
1 Set PARAMETER/SET
MENU to PARAMETER.
2 Turn on the video monitor
and press ON SCREEN
repeatedly to select the
full display mode.
3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.
PARAMETER
SET MENU
P05 ROCK CONCERT
≥ Arena
ROOM SIZE…………1.0
LIVENESS…………………7
REV.TIME…………3.3s
REV.DELAY……240ms
INIT.DLY…………22ms
HALL 1
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
ON SCREEN
Program No.
Example of the parameter setting display
Parameters
Cursor
Program name
HALL 1
6.1/ES
DSP
10KEY
ROCK
CONCERT
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CH
PRESET
DISC
PARAMETER
SET MENU
EFFECT
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TESTSLEEP
TV MUTE
CONCERT
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
ENTER-
TAINMENT
HALL 2
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
9
6
10
0
10
100
11 12
78
234
++
1
3
4
2
5
Parameter valves
65
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1
Sound Source
TimeTimeTime
Early
Reflections
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
■ ROOM SIZE
[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Large value = 99 msSmall value = 1 ms
Reflection Face
Sound Source
TimeTime Time
INIT.DLYINIT.DLYINIT.DLY
Early
Reflections
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)
[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Control Range 1 – 99 msec
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a
large room, it would be set to a large value.
66
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range
depends on the signal format.)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound.
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side
of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear
channels are used.
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Control Range 0 –10
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center
sound field.
■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.
■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Control Range 0 – 10
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.
Large value = 10Small value = 0
Large
Reflected Sound
Small Reflected
Sound
Sound Source
Live
TimeTimeTime
Dead
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
■ LIVENESS Control Range 0 – 10
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
67
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Time
REV. LEVEL
Sound Source
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Time
REV. TIMEREV.
DELAY
Reverberation
Sound Source
Level
■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Control Range 0 – 250 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Large value = 5.0 sSmall value = 1.0 s
Long
Reverberation
Short
Reverberation
Sound Source
REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME
Early Reflections
ReverberationSound SourceReverberation
■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time
for “live” sources and listening room environments.
68
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
For 6ch Stereo
■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
For PRO LOGIC Music
■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.
■ DIMENSION Control Range –3 – STD – +3
Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.
■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
69
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact
the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
On-screen display
does not appear.
No sound and/or no
picture.
The picture does not
appear.
Cause
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
on the rear panel is not fully set to the
upper or lower position.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity)
The setting for the on-screen display is
set to “DISPLAY OFF”.
The BLUE BACK setting under “13
DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is
set to OFF, and no video signal is input
to this unit.
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
The speaker connections are not secure.
The main speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Digital signals other than PCM audio,
Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this
unit cannot reproduce are being input to
this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Remedy
Firmly connect the power cord.
Set the switch fully to the upper or lower position
when this unit is in the standby mode.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and
start operating.
Select the full display or short display mode.
Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the
OSD.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l /
h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).
Secure the connections.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
Turn up the volume.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
Make connections using the same type of jack
(between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and
output.
Refer
to page
19
13
—
19
20
60
11, 12
24
11, 12
24
25
25
—
14, 15
70
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Poor bass
reproduction.
Cause
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The sleep timer has functioned.
The sound is muted.
Incorrect cable connections.
Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”
on the SET MENU.
The sound effect is off.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS decoding DSP program is being
used with material not encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is
being input to this unit.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6
except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has
been selected.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
The output level of the rear speakers is
set to minimum.
A monaural source is being played with
the program 11.
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is being played.
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a
2-channel source is being played.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and
your system does not include a
subwoofer.
The output mode for each speaker (main,
center, rear, or rear center) on the SET
MENU does not match your speaker
configuration.
Remedy
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set
to the appropriate position and then turn this unit
back on.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Adjust it to the appropriate position.
Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
Select another DSP program.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Select BOTH.
Select MAIN.
Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker
based on the size of the speakers in your
configuration.
Refer
to page
13
—
62
25
11, 12
55
29
30 – 35
26
61
51
30 – 35
—
61
30 – 35
53
53
—
53
51 – 54
71
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
No sound from the rear
center speaker.
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
The volume level is low
while playing a record.
The volume level
cannot be increased, or
the sound is distorted.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones connected
to a tape deck or CD
player that is connected
to this unit.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or this unit.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
Cause
“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
6.1/ES is not on.
Incorrect cable connections.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
It is not possible to record the sound
effect by a recording component.
A source component is only connected to
the analog input jacks of this unit.
“14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET
MENU is set to ON.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
This unit is in the standby mode.
This unit is too close to the digital or
high-frequency equipment.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Remedy
Select LRG or SML.
Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to
turn it on.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to
the GND terminal of this unit.
The turntable should be connected to this unit
through an MC-head amplifier.
Turn on the power to the component.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks of this unit.
Select OFF.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected
correctly.
Turn on the power of this unit.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it
back on.
Refer
to page
53
28, 29
17
16, 17
16, 17
16, 17
—
14 – 17
60
—
—
19
—
—
72
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
Continuous functions
such as volume
adjustment are learned,
but operate only for a
moment before
stopping.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
The batteries are weak.
The manufacturer code has not been
correctly set.
The batteries of this remote control and/
or the other remote control are too weak.
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Memory capacity is full.
Even if the manufacturer code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
The learning process is incomplete.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Reposition this unit.
Replace all batteries with new ones and press
RESET.
Set the manufacturer code correctly.
Try to set the other codes of the same
manufacturer.
Replace the batteries.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
Learning is not possible.
Further learning is not possible without deleting
unnecessary functions.
Program the necessary functions independently
into the programmable buttons on this unit’s
remote control using the Learn feature.
Be sure to press and hold the function button on
the other remote control until “OK” appears in
the display window.
Refer to
page
7
—
3
38
38
3
39
—
43
39
39
■ Remote control
73
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With three front channels (left, center and right), and two
rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-
range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency
effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and
the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with previously
unheard of excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode
vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This
new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback
with two left and right main channels, a center channel,
and two left and right rear channels compared with one
limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic
technology. Also the music mode is available for 2-
channel sources in addition to the movie mode.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two
rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,
for a total of 5.1 channels).
■ DTS Neo: 6
Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
■ CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
74
GLOSSARY
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
■ S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in
order to use the component signal for output.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ I/O assignment (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs
from the component name shown for this unit’s
component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,
it is possible to assign jacks according to the component
being connected. This makes it possible to change the
jack assignment and effectively connect more component.
75
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W
• DIN Standard Output Power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 180 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/180/240/330 W
• Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more
• Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R .............................. 0.008%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO MM to Main L/R (5 mV, shorted) ......................... 81 dB
CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz
• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ
PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ
6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ
• Output Level
REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL
• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• S-Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Component Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB
GENERAL
• Power Supply .......................................................... AC 230V/50 Hz
• Power Consumption ............................................................... 500 W
Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W
• AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe model] ..................................................... 3 (SWITCHED)
[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)
• Dimension (W x H x D)
.................................................................... 435 x 191 x 468 mm
• Weight ...................................................................................... 21 kg
• Accessories ............................................................... Remote control
Batteries
Connection guide
Power cord [Europe model only]
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DSP-AX3200
GB
AV AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Japan
V817900
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
DSP-AX3200

Documenttranscriptie

GB DSP-AX3200 DSP-AX3200 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Japan V817900 AV AMPLIFIER AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. CAUTION As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ....................................................... 1 FEATURES ........................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 37 Control Area ........................................................... 37 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 38 Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) ................................................... 39 Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 40 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ............................................................................ 42 Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ... 42 Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 43 Each Component Control Area .............................. 45 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7 Front Panel Display .................................................. 8 Rear Panel ................................................................ 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SET MENU ...................................................... 50 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14 Before Connecting Components ............................ 14 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16 Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19 Turning on the Power ............................................. 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 20 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ... 21 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS .................................................. 61 SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 62 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ....................................................... 22 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 62 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 62 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 21 ADVANCED OPERATION OSD Modes ............................................................ 20 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10 Speaker Placement ................................................. 10 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 50 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 51 2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 54 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ............................................................. 55 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 55 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 55 6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 56 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 56 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 57 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 58 10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 58 11 D-RANGE ........................................................ 59 12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 59 13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 60 14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 60 Before You Begin ................................................... 22 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 24 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27 Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 28 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ............................................................ 30 Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 30 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 30 CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ..................................................... 63 What is a sound field? ............................................ 63 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 63 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 64 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 64 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 65 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 69 GLOSSARY ..................................................... 73 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 75 Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32 CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34 BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 36 English 1 FEATURES Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 120 W + 120 W Center: 120 W Rear: 120 W + 120 W Rear center: 120 W ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Capability ◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the original signal Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES (Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1)/DTS Neo: 6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Batteries (3) (LR6) Remote control Connection Guide DVD Player OPTICAL OUT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF AUDIO OUT L CONNECTION GUIDE MACRO TRANSMIT ON S VIDEO OUT A STANDBY POWER B Subwoofer VIDEO OUT Rear Speaker Right COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Left R OPTICAL OUT SYSTEM VIDEO OUT PHONO V O V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 AUDIO L VIDEO L R S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) A 3 MD/ TAPE DVD IN (PLAY) DVD L L MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 3 CD B D-TV /LD 4 3 D-TV /LD R R CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) 6 PHONO D-TV /LD – FRONT : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION FRONT : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER + MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO – R DIGITAL INPUT A MAIN + 6CH INPUT Analog audio signal – B CENTER L IMPEDANCE SELECTOR OUT SURROUND COAXIAL TITLE + SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN CD 8 CBL /SAT 6CH INPUT + IN VCR 2 /DVR 7 – L R L SIGNAL GND R O Optical digital signal V ENTER S S video signal SOURCE VIDEO IN V SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT – SEARCH CHAPTER Video signal Signal flow + Right TV POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 2 HALL 1 PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E Rear Center Speaker Left Main Speaker 8 Power Cord (Europe model only) SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. Center Speaker V817920 MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU BASIC OPERAIONT Installing Batteries in the Remote Control RESET button After new batteries are correctly inserted, press the RESET button in the battery compartment using a ball point pen or similar object. (This does not clear the contents of the memory.) 4 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps into place. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 3 Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. APPENDIX Open the battery compartment cover. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 2 • Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the operating range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Notes on batteries 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 4 3 5 6 INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT NEXT + TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES – SET MENU MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS 7 8 9 0q TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT w e r t yu i 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 8). 4 INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see page 26). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 4 7 PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. 8 BASS EXTENSION Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 9 PROCESSOR DIRECT Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 0 SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its corresponding button is pressed. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q BASS ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. w TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. YAM AH A NA TU RA L SO UN D AV AM PLIF IE R INTRODUCTION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. Note PREPARATION VO LU ME • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. e REC OUT Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. BASIC OPERAIONT r STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. t PROGRAM l / h ADVANCED OPERATION Selects the DSP program. y 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). u NEXT — SET MENU –/+ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Changes the SET MENU settings. i VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. APPENDIX English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the controls and their functions of the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 37 to 49 for operating other components with this remote control. 1 2 3 MACRO TRANSMIT 4 5 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD y u i o p a 6CH INPUT s TITLE 6 ENTER 7 SOURCE SELECT POWER 9 10KEY DSP 0 q 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 2 HALL 1 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 7 /DTS SUR. 8 MUTE VOLUME CH DISC d f g h EFFECT PARAMETER LEVEL SLEEP TEST 5 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 6 Display window Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. 7 SOURCE SELECT k/n Selects the another component to control independently from the input that has been selected by pressing an input selector button. 8 LIGHT Turns the light on or off. When you press this button once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again to turn off the light. 0 Operation buttons Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components selected by the input selector buttons. q 6.1/ES Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position. STEREO TV MUTE ON SCREEN 4 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 9 10KEY/DSP Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL r – SEARCH CHP/INDEX w e SOUND MENU DISPLAY 8 3 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. j SET MENU k t w LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. e ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. r SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. t TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 42). 6 y CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, programmed macros, and set manufacturer codes (see pages 42 to 44). u LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 38 and 39). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS i MACRO Used to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see pages 40 to 42). Using the Remote Control INPUT INTRODUCTION o MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON p Å and ı Switch the control area for the extra components that are not connected to this unit without changing the input. a Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. SPEAKERS A B NEXT SOURCE DVD D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS 30° TREBLE REC OUT 30° VIDEO AUX Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION s 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. d DSP program/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of 10KEY/DSP. g VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. h STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and right speakers. ■ Handling the remote control j PARAMETER/SET MENU Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+ Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/ SET MENU. ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. BASIC OPERAIONT f MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. APPENDIX English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 1 V AUX 2 VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP DISCRETE DIGITAL 6.1/ES PRO LOGIC / CBL/SAT VIRTUAL D TV/LD 34 MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO DTS Neo:6 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE THEATER 12 ENTERTAINMENT MUTE SLEEP BASS P. DIRECT PCM 6 7 89 VOLUME LFE SILENT SP AB 5 0 q 1 Processor indicators When any function of DSP , DTS, DISCRETE, PRO LOGIC / VIRTUAL, g, 6.1/ES , and activated, its indicator lights up. L C R RL RC RR w e r 0 DSP program indicators is 2 Input source indicator The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. Shows the current input source with a cursor. q Multi-information display 3 SLEEP indicator Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Lights up while the sleep timer is on. 4 MUTE indicator Flashes up while the MUTE function is on. 5 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 6 v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 7 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 8 SP A B indicators Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. 9 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 29). 8 w BASS indicator Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on. e P. DIRECT Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on. r Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 AUDIO AUDIO L R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) R 4 VIDEO L S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN 5 PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER 6 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 REAR (SURROUND) A DVD DVD L L R R MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD AC OUTLETS CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) PHONO + IN + + 100W MAX. TOTAL PREPARATION SWITCHED 6 D-TV /LD IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER OUT – – – B MAIN A 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT TUNER + COAXIAL 6CH INPUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO – – R L L GND 8 2 9 0 q (Europe model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 2 Audio component jacks 9 Speaker terminals See pages 11 and 12 for connection information. 0 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch 3 Video component jacks 4 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch. See page 18 for connection information. q AC OUTLETS 5 RS232C terminal Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 19). See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. ADVANCED OPERATION See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. BASIC OPERAIONT 7 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VIDEO R DIGITAL INPUT REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : + MONITOR OUT CENTER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 AC INLET (Europe model only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cord. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 8 6CH INPUT jacks See page 18 for connection information. APPENDIX English 9 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Center speaker Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 51 for details). ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with a monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. 10 SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the Speakers CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 2 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 3 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 1 1 PREPARATION If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. INTRODUCTION Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals APPENDIX A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. English 11 SPEAKER SETUP Main B speaker Right Center Rear Center speaker speaker Left 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R 2 VIDEO L S VIDEO Subwoofer system 3 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) A DVD DVD L L R R MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD AC OUTLETS CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) SWITCHED 6 PHONO D-TV /LD + IN + + 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 OUT TUNER – – MAIN A + COAXIAL 6CH INPUT REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : + MONITOR OUT CENTER SUB WOOFER S VIDEO 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VIDEO – R DIGITAL INPUT – B 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER – R L L GND (Europe model) 4 5 Right Left Main A speaker 1 6 7 Left Right Rear speaker 4 3 5 6 2 7 The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room. ■ SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 12 SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position Speaker IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER Main Rear Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. ADVANCED OPERATION 100W MAX. TOTAL The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher. Lower Rear BASIC OPERATION SWITCHED Center SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Upper AC OUTLETS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Impedance level PREPARATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (Europe model) APPENDIX English 13 CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO jack COMPONENT jack (composite) VIDEO jacks y • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details). Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console and a video camera to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT 14 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS RF OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT LD player COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV or LD player S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT V S DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO L R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 R VIDEO L S VIDEO V S VIDEO OUTPUT PREPARATION L R COMPONENT OUTPUT DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT R L INTRODUCTION OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y A DVD DVD MD/TAPE 3 CD D-TV /LD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) (Europe model) MONITOR OUT CD-R 4 O RF INPUT OUT (REC) CD-R VCR 1 1 O PHONO D-TV /LD *1 C IN VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 C OUT CD 6 RF demodulator IN 4 5 DVD CBL /SAT OUT SURROUND 2 CENTER MONITOR OUT BASIC OPERATION 3 B D-TV /LD TUNER COAXIAL 6CH INPUT S VIDEO VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER GND L R S AUDIO OUTPUT V R L R S S Cable TV or Satellite tuner indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables indicates S-video cables VIDEO INPUT VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT *1 If your LD player has an RF OUTPUT jack, first connect it to S the RF INPUT on an RF V demodulator and then connect the RF OUTPUT on an RF VIDEO S VIDEO demodulator to the COAXIAL INPUT INPUT jack on this unit. COMPONENT INPUT Video monitor 15 English L VIDEO OUTPUT APPENDIX indicates signal direction S VIDEO OUTPUT V V S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT S L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details). Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 16 ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. CONNECTIONS OPTICAL INPUT OPTICAL INPUT INPUT OUTPUT R L L OUTPUT R R 3 IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R VIDEO L S VIDEO R L R PREPARATION AUDIO OPTICAL 1 MD/ TAPE INPUT L O DIGITAL OUTPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT CD recorder INTRODUCTION MD recorder or tape deck COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y A DVD DVD MD/TAPE OPTICAL OUTPUT O 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R OUTPUT CD player IN 4 O VCR 1 L R 5 1 DVD 6 PHONO D-TV /LD IN MAIN CD 8 OUT 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT BASIC OPERATION VCR 2 /DVR 7 C OUT CD TUNER COAXIAL COAXIAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT CENTER 6CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO GND (Europe model) R L OUTPUT GND CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT L R MAIN OUTPUT External decoder See page 18 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUBWOOFER OUTPUT R Turntable indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L ADVANCED OPERATION L English 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting to an External Amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. 1 PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) L L R R CENTER 3 4 5 1 MAIN OUT/IN jacks MAIN OUT jacks .... Main channel line output jacks. The signals output through these jacks are affected by VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION settings. MAIN IN jacks ........ Line input to this unit’s Main channel amplifiers. When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main amplifier of this unit. 2 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 18 This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes 2 MAIN OUT MAIN IN Connecting an External Decoder • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for 1F MAIN LEVEL). CONNECTIONS Connecting the Power Supply Cords Turning on the Power To AC outlet 1 INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE AC OUTLETS NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON INTRODUCTION When all connections are completed, turn on the power of this unit. SPEAKERS A B SOURCE TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 VCR2 /DVR PHONES + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 100W MAX. TOTAL – SET MENU NEXT DVD D-TV/LD SILENT SWITCHED PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + IMPEDANCE SELECTOR TREBLE PREPARATION EFFECT BASS VIDEO AUX REC OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MACRO TRANSMIT 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER ■ Connecting the AC power cord 1 [Europe model] Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the wall outlet. REC SOUND MENU – SEARCH STOP CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel Remote control The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. [U.K. model] Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Caution • Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided. Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical shock. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) BASIC OPERAIONT (Europe model) Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Europe model ............................................... 3 OUTLETS U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS is 100 W. APPENDIX English 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 60). OSD Modes Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. P01 CONCERT HALL 1 ≥ Europe Hall A INIT.DLY…………30ms ROOM SIZE…………1.O LIVENESS…………………5 P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Europe Hall A Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. 20 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU Notes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display Selecting the OSD Mode • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F Item Description Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D REAR CT SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. 1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. BASIC OPERAIONT 1A CENTER SP PREPARATION Control value (default setting indicated in bold) INTRODUCTION This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Normal/–10 dB ADVANCED OPERATION If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 51 to 54. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic , DTS, DTS ES, and DTS Neo: 6). Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 4 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6 speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. 2 Before You Begin INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND 2 AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A NATURAL SOUND B NEXT DVD AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS STANDBY /ON TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT SPEAKERS A B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 2 EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 3 3 PRESET MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 4 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. 3 SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT + BASS – + TREBLE Set to OFF. 22 1 Press TEST to output the test tone. 2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center speaker and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. TEST VOLUME Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and turn off BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR DIRECT by pressing the buttons. “BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear on the front panel display. – 3 1, 4 A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT TV VOL or Front panel VOLUME Remote control ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS LEVELS LEFT Notes RIGHT RIGHT SURROUND REAR CENTER The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→ TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR. • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 54). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 3 BASIC OPERAIONT LEFT y PREPARATION LEFT SURROUND INTRODUCTION CENTER • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 55). • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. y • You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n. 4 TEST APPENDIX When the adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. English 23 BASIC PLAYBACK 1 3 4 6 INPUT VOLUME 4 INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B NEXT DVD D-TV/LD SILENT SOURCE – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. • The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT PHONO INPUT or 6 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 74 6 Front panel 7 MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 6.1/ES 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 4 6 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 6CH INPUT 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE TITLE DISC 6 V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER 10KEY DSP 1 SOUND MENU – SEARCH CHAPTER DVD MD/TAPE DVD SP A SOURCE DISPLAY D TV/LD CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME EFFECT ENTER SELECT Remote control JAZZ CLUB 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 PHONO CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT AUTO L R + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB Selected input source Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. SYSTEM STANDBY /ON POWER To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. or 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit if you will play video sources. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. The speaker indicator(s) for the selected set(s) lights up on the front panel display. 24 Front panel Remote control SPEAKERS A B Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (one of the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. BASIC PLAYBACK 5 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. VOLUME ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PHONO VOLUME V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION or Remote control ■ To mute the sound – + – BASS + MUTE y Front panel Note Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 30 to 35 for details about the DSP program. or Front panel HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH STANDBY STANDBY /ON or JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. 8 Front panel ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 10KEY DSP PROGRAM ■ When you have finished using this unit ADVANCED OPERATION • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered for the characteristics of AV component. In this case, turn on the component. • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. TREBLE BASS EXTENSION 7 INTRODUCTION 6 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Remote control SELECT Remote control APPENDIX English 25 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on the digital signal Input Modes and Indications This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the priority of the input signal among different types of input signals. When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 57 for details). Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. Note • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. PHONO INPUT MODE or V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. – “Adjusting the Level of the Effect Speakers” described on page 61 cannot be made. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs Front panel V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT Remote control D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO AUTO VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Notes • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack has precedence over the OPTICAL jack. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing the LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. 26 • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed while the DTS source is playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a Sound Field Program 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX INPUT CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER INTRODUCTION You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However the selection depends on the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are possible for all input signal formats. For details about each program, see pages 30 to 35. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. For example, to select the sub-program “DGTL SciFi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON A B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + V AUX EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP 2 1 HALL 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES CHURCH 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 2,3 CD PHONO VOLUME DGTL Sci-Fi L RL C R RR VOLUME EFFECT 1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on the remote control. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. 10KEY DSP 10KEY DSP or 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Front panel CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT Remote control ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROGRAM ADVANCED OPERATION • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. STEREO DISC TUNER Notes 8 MUTE CH TV MUTE CD R SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MD/TAPE BASIC OPERATION CHP/INDEX 7 DVD Sub-program name JAZZ CLUB MOVIE THEATER 1 /DTS SUR. D TV/LD LFE SP A 10KEY DSP CBL/SAT MOVIE THEATER 1 DIGITAL PREPARATION Program name SPEAKERS SILENT PHONES Program name V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME APPENDIX DSP MOVIE THEATER 1 LFE DIGITAL SP A DGTL Spectacle L RL C R RR Sub-program name English 27 BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting PRO LOGIC 3 or Neo: 6 You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 in the program No. 11. INPUT Press the numeric button 12 repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6. The decoder selection switches among PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC and Neo: 6 on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L 10KEY DSP HALL 1 6.1/ES B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT CBL/SAT 4 TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO + MD/TAPE CD-R CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT SPEAKERS A HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT STANDBY /ON PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT 4 2 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES 7 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 2,3,4 8 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 /DTS SUR. SELECT Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music (when Neo: 6 is selected) PRESET A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the source by pressing the numeric button 11. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music (when PRO LOGIC is selected) EFFECT 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6 (Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT ■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES software Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker. 6.1/ES Front panel CHP/INDEX (For remote control only) 2 Press the numeric button 11 on the remote control. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 7 /DTS SUR. VCR2/DVR VCR 1 PRO LOGIC / 28 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER SP A 6.1/ES CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME MOVIE THEATER 1 SP A Spectacle 6.1 L C R RL RC RR Notes CD PHONO • No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. • The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1channel source also. VOLUME PRO LOGIC DSP VCR 1 DIGITAL The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 → OFF each time the 6.1/ES button is pressed. 8 SELECT Remote control V AUX VCR2/DVR DSP The “ c ” indicator lights up. JAZZ CLUB 1 ROCK CONCERT V AUX PRO LOGIC L R BASIC PLAYBACK AUTO: Mtrx6.1: OFF: Virtual CINEMA DSP Note Front panel Remote control Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers and rear center speaker. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ■ Displaying the information about the input source You can display the information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the component connected to this unit. 1 Select the input source you want to obtain the information about by pressing an input selector button. PHONO 2 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press STEREO/EFFECT to light STEREO. STEREO EFFECT 3 Press k/n to display the information about the input signal. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU APPENDIX You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) EFFECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SILENT CINEMA DSP or EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. STEREO STEREO BASIC OPERATION With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. PREPARATION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA DSP ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction INTRODUCTION Disc6.1: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that this unit can detect. Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This mode can be selected only when the source with DTS ES Discrete format has been detected. This mode makes 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder. Rear center speaker does not work in this mode. (Except for when the DSP program “6ch Stereo” or “Neo: 6” is selected.) Notes • This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if the sound effect is on; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. English 29 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Understanding Sound Fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. ■ Recreating a sound field Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. Hi-Fi DSP Programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. No. 1 2 3 30 Program CONCERT HALL 1 CONCERT HALL 2 CHURCH Features Europe Hall A This is a large fan-shaped concert hall with approximately 2500 seats. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. Europe Hall B This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. U.S.A. Hall C This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. Live Concert A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. Freiburg This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) No. 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. The Roxy Theatre The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. Arena A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. BASIC OPERATION Village Gate PREPARATION 6 JAZZ CLUB Features INTRODUCTION 5 Program ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 31 CINEMA-DSP Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6 decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 32 CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. /DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/ CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source. APPENDIX English 33 CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP Programs ■ For movie programs: No. 9 to 11 According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 9 10 11 2 channel 6.1 channel *1 5.1 channel Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DTS ES 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General ES — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — ES Matrix 6.1 ES Discrete 6.1 *2 — — Enhanced — Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Cinema — — — — Music — — — — Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC DTS Neo: 6 *1 means the 6.1/ES decoder is ON. *2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Note • The “ 34 ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode. CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Note INTRODUCTION • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. No. 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 11 MOVIE THEATER 1 Features PREPARATION 10 Program ■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 6 to 8 Program Features Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 7 CONCERT VIDEO Pop/Rock This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Opera This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs, or sports programs. 8 TV THEATER 35 English ENTERTAINMENT APPENDIX 6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No. BASIC RECORDING REC OUT allows you to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT 2 1 Turn on the power to this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to SOURCE. SOURCE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT • To record the other source than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to the source you want to record. SOURCE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT Note • At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch during recording by pressing INPUT l/h (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. y • Setting REC OUT to SOURCE and using the BGV function (see page 25) allows the recording of audio and video from a different source. 36 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation instruction for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output during the recording with a timer, turn the volume down. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. PREPARATION Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. Control Area ■ Control area for each component The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. You can use the functions within this area no matter which component control area is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the component to be operated. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM OFF ON A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT POWER DSP is selected 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER TITLE SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH SELECT REC STOP PAUSE PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE 10KEY DSP VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT 6.1/ES PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP 10 key is selected POWER HALL 2 HALL 1 REC CHURCH STOP JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 HALL 1 7 A/B/C/D/E 2 1 /DTS SUR. SELECT ENTERTAINMENT 12 6 +100 +105 6.1/ES PRESET PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 MUTE CH + PAUSE MOVIE THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX TV INPUT CHAPTER MOVIE THEATER 1 TEST TV VOL HALL 8 2 ROCK CONCERT 11 0 CHP/INDEX SOUND – SEARCH A/B/C/D/E ENTER MENU PLAY DISPLAY POWER + CHAPTER A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 ROCK CONCERT Input selector buttons and Å/ ı buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Å and ı buttons cannot be used as an input selector button. Factory setting: Å ........... LD player ı ..... Satellite tuner ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons, and Å/ı buttons MACRO STANDBY BASIC OPERATION ■ Control area of this unit POWER INTRODUCTION The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes. VOLUME PRESET STEREO TV MUTE DISC TV INPUT EFFECT TV VOL CH TV MUTE DISC APPENDIX Component control area There are 13 component control areas (See pages 45 to 49). You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area. See pages 38 to 39. English 37 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 3 You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component control area. Press k / n to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. If you are to make a setting for different component from the factory setting, change the library as described in step 3 on right. 1 Input area Component category (Library) Manufacturer A LD YAMAHA – B SATELLITE TUNER PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA CD CD YAMAHA V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA CD-R CD-R YAMAHA D-TV/LD TV – VCR 1 VCR – VCR 2/DVR VCR – DVD DVD YAMAHA ENTER If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE, TUNER, AMP, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR Note If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it works following step 4. 4 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to set up. Press one of the buttons shaded below to check if it works for the component being set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been correctly made. 6CH INPUT TITLE A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY y • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN LEARN Notes Notes • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 38 • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN A MACRO B ON MACRO OFF PHONO INTRODUCTION TRANSMIT STANDBY CD SYSTEM CD-R POWER MD/TAPE 6CH INPUT TUNER ENTER V-AUX TITLE DVD SOURCE VCR2/DVR Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. VCR 1 6 If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. CBL/SAT Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. D-TV/LD 5 Note TRANSMIT SYSTEM RE-NAME LEARN A MACRO B ON MACRO OFF CD BASIC OPERATION CLEAR DVD PHONO DVD CD-R VCR2/DVR MD/TAPE VCR 1 STANDBY CBL/SAT TUNER CD D-TV/LD 6CH INPUT CD-R ENTER MD/TAPE V-AUX TITLE B TUNER POWER SOURCE A V-AUX VCR2/DVR Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select a source component. VCR 1 2 10KEY DSP CBL/SAT Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY. D-TV/LD 1 PREPARATION • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) PHONO Notes Place this remote control and the other remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. ON Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional functions. 8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. MACRO CD OFF DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT 7 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch) 4 LEARN Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5 and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 4. 39 English Flashes alternately Notes • It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a DSP program. • If the batteries in the other remote control are weak, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. APPENDIX Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. LEARN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MACRO B LEARN A CD-R CLEAR MD/TAPE RE-NAME STANDBY TRANSMIT TUNER SYSTEM V-AUX POWER VCR 1 ENTER VCR2/DVR CBL/SAT TITLE D-TV/LD SOURCE • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make further learning on the remote control. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro Feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see pages 41 and 42). Press one of the macro buttons Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially CD SYSTEM CD POWER Macro buttons PLAY (CD area) Second Third PHONO First PHONO – V-AUX V-AUX – TUNER TUNER – (*4) MD/TAPE MD/TAPE PLAY (MD/TAPE area) (*3) CD-R CD-R PLAY CD CD PLAY D-TV/LD D-TV/LD – CBL/SAT – (CD-R area) (*3) (CD area) (*3) SYSTEM POWER CBL/SAT (*1) VCR 1 VCR 1 VCR2/DVR VCR2/DVR DVD DVD PLAY PLAY (VCR 1 area) (*3) (VCR 2/DVR area) (*3) PLAY (DVD area) (*3) A – – B – – SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY (D-TV/LD area) (*2) STANDBY – – – *1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those components to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.) *2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV is turned off. *3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders, DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the PLAY button on the control area of that component (see page 39) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 38). *4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby mode. 40 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the macro MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR 1 2 MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD MACRO MACRO ON/OFF PHONO Macro buttons Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press a macro button. Notes You can program your own macros and use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button. Notes • If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes the component. 3 Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include in the macro operation sequence in order. y • You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro mode. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO ADVANCED OPERATION 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY 1 2 MCR 1 : DVD a MCR 2 : DVD p ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or program a function with the remote control for your component. • This remote control handles button signals that operate continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro steps are therefore not recommended. y indicate the number of macro steps you entered Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. appear alternately so that you can set up the next step MACRO Note • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2. APPENDIX Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. BASIC OPERATION ■ Programming a macro Note • “AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other than the macro buttons is pressed. PREPARATION • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does not receive any other button’s function until the macro operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation has been completed. 1 Press a macro button for which you want to program the macro operation. The button you chose for programming the macro operation and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. INTRODUCTION SYSTEM LEARN 2 English 41 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. y MACRO • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. RE-NAME Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes 1 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name from the original input selector button names. This is useful when different component is set in the input selector button. 1 2 3 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and / (slash). (Pressing k goes in the reverse order.) ENTER 4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. ENTER 42 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. 2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to clear the function, Macros, renamed source names or manufacturer codes. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. CLEAR Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from step 1. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press k / n to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: You can clear the function learned in a certain programmable button in each area. ■ To clear a learned function 1 Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all programmed macros. 2 B TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. LEARN Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 3 CLEAR CLEAR Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 5 CLEAR Note LEARN ■ To clear the macro function 1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component for which you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO English • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. APPENDIX Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press the button that you want to clear for 3 seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “C:OK” appears in the display window. ADVANCED OPERATION 4 PHONO BASIC OPERATION Clears all renamed source names in the display window. A V-AUX PREPARATION Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. INTRODUCTION (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Press the input selector button, Å or ı to select the component. Clearing a Learned Function or Macro 43 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. MACRO 3 ■ SOURCE SELECT k / n You can control another component independently from the input you have selected by pressing an input selector button. Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the component and set the remote control to be used for it. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO, V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner), VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object, and at the same time press the button for which you want to clear the macro for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y • Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot select OPTN. SOURCE SELECT y • You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those learned functions or macros have been programmed. OPTN is an extra component control area that can be programmed with other remote control functions. Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again. 4 ■ OPTN (option) area Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. Note • You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See page 38 for the programming procedure. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY MACRO SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Pressing n always selects OPTN first 44 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION TITLE 6CH INPUT TITLE Menu cursor/ENTER ENTER MENU DISPLAY SEARCH POWER Return SOURCE SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT – SEARCH POWER REC STOP + CHAPTER PAUSE INTRODUCTION The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. Audio Skip PLAY PLAY PAUSE HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Title/Index CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION STOP Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER ADVANCED OPERATION * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. + SEARCH POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY PLAY PAUSE 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES TV/Video input HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * CHURCH A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. APPENDIX POWER Record (Press twice to start recording) STOP MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. 45 English DISC REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/ SAT area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH POWER REC STOP CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB POWER HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES Enter TV INPUT CHP/INDEX TV VOL +/– TV VOL HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. * Numeric buttons SELECT PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT TV MUTE * SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. ■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search) SEARCH POWER POWER STOP SOUND + 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES Chapter/Time REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * PAUSE Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 38 because TV is factory-set for this input selector button. * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in PHONO. 46 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD INTRODUCTION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH + CHAPTER SEARCH Skip REC STOP PAUSE PLAY PLAY PAUSE HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES INDEX PREPARATION POWER POWER STOP HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. BASIC OPERATION TV VOL ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADVANCED OPERATION SYSTEM POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + Skip SEARCH POWER Record (MD only) POWER 10KEY DSP STOP INDEX (CD-R only) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCE 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons SELECT Clear (CD-R only) PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE APPENDIX A/B/C/D/E * PAUSE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. English 47 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE Display ENTER SOURCE SEARCH (backward/forward) POWER Record SELECT – SEARCH REC 6.1/ES STOP HALL 1 10KEY DSP HALL 2 PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE Numeric button (MD only) SELECT PRESET TV INPUT * A/B + CHAPTER Direction A/B POWER STOP INDEX (MD only) SOUND MENU DISPLAY MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE POWER POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES – SEARCH REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E TV VOL /DTS SUR. SELECT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * These buttons function when the manufacturer code “Yama2” is set up. 48 Preset number 1 to 8 * PRESET TV INPUT Preset group A/B/C/D/E SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT PRESET +/– REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the component set in Å or ı YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting procedure described on page 38. SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES – SEARCH REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION The functions of these buttons in the component control area differ for the component you set in Å or ı. SOUND MENU INTRODUCTION These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white buttons area shown below can be used for the component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component. MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 49 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. y Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. 5 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES 4 TV THEATER 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 7 /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC Note JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX 2,3,5 3,4 CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP 1B MAIN SP Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU. PARAMETER SET MENU 1C REAR L/R SP 1D REAR CT SP 2 1E LFE/BASS OUT Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to 14) you want to adjust. 1F MAIN LEVEL 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 7A CMPNT-V INPUT 7B OPTICAL OUT 7C OPTICAL IN 7D COAXIAL IN 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI 10 LFE LEVEL 11 D-RANGE 12 SP DELAY TIME 13 DISPLAY SET 14 MEMORY GUARD 50 SET MENU 1/4 1 ≥ 2 3 4 3 SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz SET MENU 4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of the item. Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes 5 10KEY DSP or HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) PREPARATION Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the SET MENU. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. INTRODUCTION 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 1A CENTER SP ADVANCED OPERATION LRG SML NONE 1A CENTER SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE APPENDIX NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP English LRG SML NONE 51 SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL Note • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LRG SML NONE y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. 52 SET MENU ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals are directed to both main right and left speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG 1D REAR CT SP Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and right rear speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1D REAR CT SP ADVANCED OPERATION 1D REAR CT SP BASIC OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. PREPARATION LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. INTRODUCTION ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) Note APPENDIX • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. English 53 SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal 2 LOW FRQ TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1F MAIN LEVEL Notes Normal -10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. 2 1F MAIN LEVEL Normal -10dB Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to select the frequency you want to use. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R ≥ FRQ……………………88Hz 54 SET MENU 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Freq. Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) 4 HP TONE CTRL ≥ BASS TRBL Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band - Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R Press –/+ to adjust the level of that frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ 100Hz ≥ 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz Press + to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press – for the right main speaker. - +3dB + y 55 English • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 22 and 23). APPENDIX -/+ : Adjust / : Exit + ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 0dB ADVANCED OPERATION ≥ 100Hz 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) L …………………… ……………………R 0 Press n to select a higher frequency and k to select a lower frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ Band pass filter 3 L/R BALANCE 0dB 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) 1 Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. + - BASIC OPERATION Noise Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. PREPARATION The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. INTRODUCTION ■ About the test tone 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) SET MENU 6 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT l / h) to select the input you want to change the name of. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD -/+ : Position / : Character 2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD [B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/LD -/+ : Position / : Character 7A CMPNT-V INPUT ≥ [A]…………… DVD [B]……………D-TV/LD 3 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and –/+ to move to the next one. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD1 -/+ : Position / : Character ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, TUNER (2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R 7B OPTICAL OUT ≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE (2)…………… CD-R Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 56 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. SET MENU ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3) to (6) Choices: AUTO LAST -/+ : Select / : Exit Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7) and (8) (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, TUNER (8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, TUNER Initial settings: (7) CD (8) CBL/SAT ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: BASIC OPERATION (3)…………… CD (4)…………… CD-R ≥ (5)…………… DVD (6)……………D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE PREPARATION 7C OPTICAL IN Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input mode). INTRODUCTION (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, TUNER (4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER (5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, TUNER (6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, TUNER Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 7D COAXIAL IN (7)…………… CD ≥ (8)………CBL/SAT Note APPENDIX • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. English 57 SET MENU 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the DSP program that you want to initialize. The asterisk (*) next to the program number means that the parameter values have been changed. 9 PARAM. INI 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *10 Press 10 LFE LEVEL This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE 1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted. 11 No. Key 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER………………0dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Notes • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 60), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. 2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level. 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 58 SET MENU 11 D-RANGE (dynamic range) 11 D-RANGE ≥ SP: MAX STD MIN HP: MAX STD MIN STD Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER 0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER 3 ms for REAR CENTER Press –/+ to increase or decrease the delay of the center and the rear center channel sounds. ADVANCED OPERATION 12 SP DELAY TIME BASIC OPERATION MIN Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. PREPARATION MAX Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. 12 SP DELAY TIME ≥ CENTER…………………0ms REAR CNTR…………3ms Center speaker image ADDITIONAL INFORMATION C L R RC RR APPENDIX RL C RC y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. English 59 SET MENU 13 DISPLAY SET 13 DISPLAY SET ≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO OSD SHIFT………………0 DIMMER………………………0 14 MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF 14 MEMORY GUARD ■ BLUE BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a blue background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Initial setting: AUTO ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 Press + to lower the position of the OSD. Press – to raise the position of the OSD. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 60 OFF ON -/+ : Select / : Exit Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Notes • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE STEREO DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 y Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and subwoofer. LEVEL • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and “1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test Tone on pages 22 and 23. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right rear speaker output level ADVANCED OPERATION Center speaker output level Notes BASIC OPERATION 2 • When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker appears on the front panel display and you can check the speaker level. PREPARATION 1 VOLUME CH TV MUTE 2 3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center, left and right rear or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear, rear center and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level Subwoofer output level APPENDIX y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing n/k. LEVEL English 61 SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLETS. 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. CONCERT HALL1 L R y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions for the timer. Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. Setting the Sleep Timer 10KEY DSP HALL 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF B ON TUNER CBL/SAT MD/TAPE VCR 1 CD-R CD VCR2/DVR HALL 2 ROCK CONCERT PHONO 6.1/ES V-AUX D-TV/LD A STANDBY 4 TV THEATER 7 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ENTER DISPLAY POWER 10KEY DSP 1 ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SOUND MENU SEARCH – y PARAMETER SOURCE SELECT SELECT PRESET TV VOL TITLE SLEEP 8 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 A/B/C/D/E 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX 1 DVD CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT 1 MACRO TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER CHAPTER SET MENU 2 + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Select a source and start playback on the source component. PHONO 2 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP OFF V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT SLEEP 90 min. SLEEP 30 min. D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R SLEEP 60 min. TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A 62 SLEEP 120min L R SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on pages 65 to 68. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. ADVANCED OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. BASIC OPERATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 65 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. PREPARATION ■ Elements of a sound field Sound Field Program Parameters INTRODUCTION What is a sound field? APPENDIX English 63 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 4 Press k / n to select the parameter. 5 Press –/+ to change the parameter value. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. y y • We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. 3 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E SELECT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. 3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust. HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH ON SCREEN JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Program No. /DTS SUR. SELECT Program name P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor ≥ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. SET MENU 2 10KEY DSP Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 1 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 6 JAZZ CLUB 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX 4 2 5 CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT Arena INIT.DLY…………22ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………7 REV.TIME…………3.3s REV.DELAY……240ms Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factoryset value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 58). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. Notes Parameters Parameter valves Example of the parameter setting display 64 • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 60). DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Function: Description: Control Range 1 – 99 msec Sound Source Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY INIT.DLY BASIC OPERATION Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms Description: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Sound Source ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Function: PREPARATION This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Time Sound Source APPENDIX Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 English 65 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Sound Source Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Time Sound Source Small Reflected Sound Large Reflected Sound Small value = 0 ■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Function: Large value = 10 Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound. ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. ■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function: 66 Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. ■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. ■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function: Control Range 0 –10 Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Reverberation Sound Source Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB Sound Source 60 dB REV. TIME REV. TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Description: Control Range 0 – 250 msec BASIC OPERATION Small value = 1.0 s Function: PREPARATION REV. TIME INTRODUCTION Description: Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec Sound Source (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Sound Source APPENDIX Level Function: Description: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REV. DELAY REV. LEVEL English Time 67 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For 6ch Stereo ■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Function: Music ■ PANORAMA 68 Control Range –3 – STD – +3 Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. ■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Function: Control Range OFF/ON Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. For PRO LOGIC Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % Control Range 0 – 7 Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem Firmly connect the power cord. 19 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the upper or lower position. Set the switch fully to the upper or lower position when this unit is in the standby mode. 13 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. — This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 19 The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 20 The BLUE BACK setting under “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 60 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11, 12 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 24 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 24 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 25 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and output. 14, 15 11, 12 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX The picture does not appear. The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound and/or no picture. Refer to page BASIC OPERAIONT On-screen display does not appear. Remedy PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English 69 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. No sound from the effect speakers. Remedy Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 13 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 62 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11, 12 Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 55 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 29 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 61 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 51 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6 except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has been selected. Select another DSP program. 70 30 – 35 — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 11. Select another DSP program. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 53 “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 53 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 30 – 35 26 The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. Refer to page 61 30 – 35 — “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 53 51 – 54 TROUBLESHOOTING No sound from the rear center speaker. “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 6.1/ES is not on. Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to turn it on. 28, 29 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 16, 17 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 16, 17 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. 16, 17 The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 60 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of this unit. 19 There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — A “humming” sound can be heard. Remedy Refer to page 53 PREPARATION Cause INTRODUCTION Problem — BASIC OPERAIONT 14 – 17 ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 71 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Continuous functions such as volume adjustment are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 72 Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones and press RESET. 3 The manufacturer code has not been correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly. 38 Try to set the other codes of the same manufacturer. 38 The batteries of this remote control and/ or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 39 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions. 43 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons on this unit’s remote control using the Learn feature. 39 The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. 39 GLOSSARY DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Pro Logic This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. APPENDIX Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with two left and right main channels, a center channel, and two left and right rear channels compared with one limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic technology. Also the music mode is available for 2channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ LFE 0.1 channel ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ Dolby Digital PREPARATION Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround INTRODUCTION ■ Dolby Surround English 73 GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ S VIDEO signal With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 74 ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W • Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/180/240/330 W • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R .............................. 0.008% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to Main L/R (5 mV, shorted) ......................... 81 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB GENERAL • Power Supply .......................................................... AC 230V/50 Hz • Power Consumption ............................................................... 500 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ..................................................... 3 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Dimension (W x H x D) .................................................................... 435 x 191 x 468 mm • Weight ...................................................................................... 21 kg • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries Connection guide Power cord [Europe model only] * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Output Level REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ ADVANCED OPERATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ BASIC OPERAIONT • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω PREPARATION • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 75 GB DSP-AX3200 DSP-AX3200 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Japan V817900 AV AMPLIFIER AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78

Yamaha DSP-AX3200 Handleiding

Yamaha
Merk
Yamaha
Model
DSP-AX3200
Categorie
Audio versterkers
Type
Handleiding
Download PDF
rapport

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen

Andere documenten